JP2020182699A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can prevent a setting suggestion performance from being overlooked by a player.SOLUTION: A game machine capable of performing a variable display, controlling a state to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and setting a value to any one of a plurality of set values having different degrees of advantage for the player includes: variable display period determining means capable of determining a variable display period from a plurality of periods including a first period and a second period that is shorter than the first period; and setting suggestion performance means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance for suggesting setting of a set value during the variable display. The setting suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate during execution of the variable display in the first period than during execution of the variable display in the second period.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display, can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player.

As a conventional game machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and an effect suggesting which setting value is set (setting suggestion effect). Is feasible during variable display (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, if the execution period of the variable display is short, the player may overlook the setting suggestion effect executed by the variable display.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a player from overlooking a setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine described in means 1
Variable display is performed, and it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player is set. A gaming machine that can be set to a value (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variable display period is the first period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation period of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14) and the second period (for example, which is shorter than the first period). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, a variable display period determining means (for example, CPU 103 can be determined from a plurality of periods including a non-reach or normal reach special figure variation period of 3.75 seconds to 20 seconds). The part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in 5) and
During the variable display, the setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect) for suggesting the setting of the set value. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in) and
An effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period, and
With
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate during the execution of the variable display in the first period than during the execution of the variable display in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the super reach While the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed in the normal reach and non-reach variable display),
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until the specific timing in the specific period, and then continues to suggest the control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the set value is performed (for example, FIG. 10-). 12),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the variable display of the second period in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the first period, so that the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. Can be done. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing, it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine described in means 2
Variable display is performed, and it is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player is set. A gaming machine that can be set to a value (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
The variable display period is the first period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation period of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14) and the second period (for example, which is shorter than the first period). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-14, a variable display period determining means (for example, CPU 103 can be determined from a plurality of periods including a non-reach or normal reach special figure variation period of 3.75 seconds to 20 seconds). The part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in 5) and
During the variable display, the setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect) for suggesting the setting of the set value. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in) and
An effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period, and
With
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate during the execution of the variable display in the first period than during the execution of the variable display in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the super reach While the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed in the normal reach and non-reach variable display),
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then terminates the suggestion, and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the second suggestion effects, which is continuously performed and suggests the setting of the set value (see, for example, FIG. 10-13).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the variable display of the second period in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the first period, so that the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked. Can be done. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after the specific timing, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The period during which the setting suggestion effect executing means executes the setting suggestion effect is longer than the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is shortened and non-reach. The part longer than the fluctuation time)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period than the second period during the variable display of the first period, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
During the execution of the variable display of the first period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period corresponding to the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display of the super reach is variable. Then, the part where the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds),
During the execution of the variable display of the second period, the setting suggestion effect can be executed over a special period that is shorter than the specific period and is a period corresponding to the second period (for example, variant 153SG-). As shown in FIG. 8-34 as No. 3, in the variable display of shortened non-reach, the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 3 seconds).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the variable display period, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect can be increased.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
A hold storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning process shown in FIG. 8-15) that can store information related to the variable display as hold storage.
A determination means capable of determining that the variable display period is the first period before the determination by the variable display period determination means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16). When,
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a look-ahead effect (for example, a display pattern) suggesting that the variable display period is the first period before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage information of the determination target of the determination means. Pre-reading effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that can execute the pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIG. 8-18 after executing the pre-reading effect setting process shown in FIG. The part that executes the display update process) and
It is characterized by further providing.
According to this feature, since the player can pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by executing the look-ahead effect, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of the means 6 is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The determination means can determine that the variable display period is the second period before the determination by the variable display period determination means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16, the CPU 103 has a random value at the time of winning. In the judgment process, the variable category can be judged as other or non-reach including normal reach),
The look-ahead effect executing means does not execute the look-ahead effect when the determination means determines that the variable display period is the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), the variable category is not. In the case of reach or other, the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is not determined as the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, although the player is paying attention to the execution of the look-ahead effect, the variable display in the second period prevents the setting suggestion effect from being executed and the interest from being lowered. be able to.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 3, the means 5, and the means 6.
The special suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the special suggestion effect (for example, timer effect) suggesting that the setting suggestion effect is executed is in the front variable display shown in FIG. 8-25. After deciding to execute the timer effect in the suggestion effect determination process, the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 7 is executed).
The special suggestion effect executing means does not execute the special suggestion effect during the variable display in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 super-reaches the variable display variation pattern. The part where the execution of the timer effect can be determined in the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display only when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even though the setting suggestion effect is not executed during the variable display of the second period, the special suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the second period, which causes inconsistency in the effect. Can be prevented.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the gaming machines of the following means 8 to 14. Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines in which set values can be set, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there has been an effect of suggesting set values. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the effect suggesting the set value is not related to other effects, and it may be difficult to improve the game interest. In view of this point, the improvement of the game interest is improved. There is a need to provide gaming machines that make it possible.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Suggested over a specific period with a setting means that can be set to any of the values (for example, 1 to 6) (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A). After providing an effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the effect, the effect executing means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. As an effect that can be executed after the specific timing, the first suggestion effect that continuously gives suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state and the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state are continuously performed and the setting of the setting means is related. Of the second suggestion effect for making a suggestion, any suggestion effect can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 10-12).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous for the player, and a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Suggested over a specific period with a setting means that can be set to any of the values (for example, 1 to 6) (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value changing process in step S6A). After providing an effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing the effect, the effect executing means makes a suggestion regarding control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. , One of the first suggestion effect for ending the suggestion and the second suggestion effect for continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing and suggesting the setting of the setting means. Suggestion effects can be performed (see, for example, FIGS. 10-13).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after a specific timing. Can be done.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 8, and the specific period may be included in at least an execution period of the variable display capable of executing the reach effect (for example, a period after the timing T2). ..
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to the means 8 or the means 10, and as a reach mode of the variable display, a plurality of types of reach modes (for example, reach of 1 to 7) in which the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different. (Symbols, etc.) are included, and the effect executing means can change the reach mode to a specific mode (for example, the symbol display color is copper, silver, gold, etc.) after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to the means 8, the means 10 or the means 11, and the effect executing means is an effect of a different mode depending on the setting of the setting means after the specific timing. For example, it may be possible to execute an effect corresponding to patterns RE-0 to RE-3, which are setting suggestion patterns.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to the means 9, and the effect executing means changes the effect mode stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages, and the number of stages in which the effect mode is changed increases. According to this, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect (for example, a step-up notice effect) in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is increased.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine according to the means 13, and the advantageous state notification stage (for example, the fourth step of the step-up notice effect) for notifying the plurality of stages of being controlled to the advantageous state is used. ) And a setting suggestion stage (for example, the fifth step of the step-up notice effect) for suggesting the setting of the setting means, and the effect execution means changes the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage. Later, after the specific timing, the effect mode can be changed to the setting suggestion stage, and the setting suggestion stage may have a longer execution period than the advantageous state notification stage (for example, FIG. 10-). 11).
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the reach symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting suggestion pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advance notice production decision processing. It is a figure which shows the setting example about the notice type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the step number pattern and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outer frame display pattern and the like. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution period and execution timing of various effects. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the setting suggestion effect using a reach symbol. It is a figure which shows the execution example of a step-up notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production pattern of the chance up production. It is a figure which shows the production pattern determination ratio of the chance up effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect pattern of the setting value suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect pattern determination ratio of the setting value suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution period of the chance up effect and the set value suggestion effect.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and the gaming state after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like / extinguishing, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," a predetermined small hit combination "is displayed as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (Detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead judgment is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead advance notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of the prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".
(Explanation of feature section 153SG)

Next, the game machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-31.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 153SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 153SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 153SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 153SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 153SG003a, and when the glass door frame 153SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and a player other than the clerk can open the game machine frame 153SG003 and glass. The door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R is the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 153SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 153SG002L, and in the right game area 153SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Further, a first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 153SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, a reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 153SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 153SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 153SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting changeover main body portion provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 153SG003 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 153SG003. Further, since the lock switch 153SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 153SG051. Further, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 153SG201, a display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 153SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 153SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko game machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Instrument 153SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 153SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 153SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 153SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 153SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 153SG002R. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 153SG 132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 153SG 133 that lights up in a probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 153SG134 that lights up in a high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 153SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 153SG025A and second hold display 153SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) according to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 153SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure hold memory and 2 2nd special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the 1st hold indicator 153SG025A is lit and the 2nd hold is on. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 153SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 153SG321 and a second movable body 153SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 153SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 153SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 153SG321 and the second movable body 153SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322. The origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 153SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 153SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, etc.) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state when it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different depending on each set value (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values up to 1020-1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421, with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-9. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, and 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). Assigned.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 are fluctuations in the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-). It is assigned to 3).

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for a low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach deviation (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α deviation (PA2-2). 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio, so that the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), the variation is made by using the deviation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reservations of the special symbol and the number of reservations of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 153SG029 includes a first display unit 153SG029A, a second display unit 153SG029B, a third display unit 153SG029C, and a fourth display unit 153SG029D. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 153SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 8-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A). A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 153SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 153SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 153SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194. In the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A, the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage is set. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the is finished.

Further, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment has a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 8-18) described later. The storage area of the hold display flag in which is set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later. As a result, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (star)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a blue or red camera), it is usually set. The reserved storage display in a mode different from the display mode of is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, and there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage display will be a big hit. It is foretold that there is a high possibility of reaching and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is likely to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (153SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (153SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 153SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (153SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (153SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (153SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), 153SGSa010 is not executed and 153SGSa011 is set. move on.

In 153SGsa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the game machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (153SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (153SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (153SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (153SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the set value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the lock switch 153SG051 being turned off, and the set value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (153SGSa012; N) in 153SGSa011, the process proceeds to 153SGSa013d without executing the processes of 153SGSa013a to 153SGSa013c.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (153SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 153SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 153SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e) Proceed to 153SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153SGSa017 to 153SGsa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress.

In 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (153SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 153SGSa028. (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 153SG090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (153SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (153SGsa026; N), the processes of 153SGsa025 and 153SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (153SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 153SG029. Ends blinking (153SGSa027) and proceeds to 153SGSa028.

The feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 are blinked over a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (153SGSa029) and allow interrupts (153SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (153SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (153SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timer-out (153SGSa034; N), the processes of 153SGsa033 and 153SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timer-out (153SGsa034; Y), the set value error error occurs. 1st display unit 153SG029A, 2nd display unit 153SG029B, 3rd display unit 153SG029C, 4th display unit 153SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 153SG029, as notification (error notification) of recovery from power failure during occurrence or setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (153SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGSa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 153SGSa032 (153SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 153SGsa032-153SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 153SG029. , The first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 153SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 153SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clearing process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 153SGSa008 (153SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 153SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 153SGSa014 (153SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is (153SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (153SGS103). ).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 (153SGS101; N), or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in 153SGS105 (153SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106). ).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination is extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (153SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2". , Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 153SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of the 153SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (153SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (153SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y at 153 SGS 114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (153 SGS 115), and then the process proceeds to 153 SGS 104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 153 SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 153 SGS 112 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set by the special symbol normal process (S110 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 153SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, whether or not it is determined that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Determines whether or not is in the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the hold display advance notice effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown), thereby pachinko. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (153SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) when the start port buffer value is 1, and FIG. 8-7 when the start port buffer value is 2. The display result determination table for the second special figure shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the numerical range of the jackpot (judgment range of the jackpot) according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted by 153 SGS109 in FIG. 8-15. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 153SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

If it is determined by the 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved during variable display (153SGS123; N), it is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table. With reference to the numerical range of small hits (judgment range of small hits) according to the set value, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 153SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 is It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 153 SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing with and one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “small hit”.

When it is determined by the 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result becomes "missing". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (153SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time reduction flag is not set (153SGS126; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (153SGS127), and if the time reduction flag is set (153SGS126; Y), the deviation pattern is changed. The determination table D is selected and set (153SGSS128).

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed. is there.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The fluctuation pattern determination table B for deviation and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of stored storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 8-11, these deviations Of the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the deviation pattern determination table A, a value from 0 to 450 within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern. In the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, in the 153SGS 132 described later, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach and super reach determinations are always made even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, the determination at the time of starting winning is made by using the deviation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when the 153SGS123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (153SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for (153SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in the 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Set (153SG132).

Further, when it is determined by the 153SGS124 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit is obtained during the variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

After executing any of the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132, the numerical data indicating the fluctuation pattern judgment table set in the processes of 153 SGS 127, 153 SGS 128, 153 SGS 129, and 153 SGS 132 and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment Is used to determine the variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (153SGS133). In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable categories that are variable display modes, variable categories that are variable display modes of "super reach", and "others" that are variable display modes other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hits) It suffices if a variable category is provided and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 8-17 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U. Any one of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the hold display update process for updating the display mode and the number of displayed hold storage displays according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). It is designed to execute the processing of.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the read-ahead notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (153SGS241), and there is an entry in which the hold display flag is not set. Whether or not it is determined (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (153SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (153SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, if the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (in 153SGS242, the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the red camera. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. If the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is out of order or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is Super Reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B), in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is compared with the case where the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation). Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 8-19, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-18, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is executed (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a big hit or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (A)). Set a value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282). During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153 SGS 285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). It executes control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Each time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) and has a hold display flag corresponding to the variable display. Specify the value of (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153 SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 153 SGS 302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect is changed to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-24, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153 SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the presence or absence of the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect and the suggestion during the front variable display are based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, the pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Of these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 8-27 (C), 8-29 (D), and 8-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-27 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display whose execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and 8-28 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-29 to 8-31. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (C) to 8-29 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-29 (D). The update display of the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during the variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left portion of the image display device 5, and the rear portion is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (F) to 8-30 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-30 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −30 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (L) to 8-31 (P). In the case of the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the aspect of the blue or red camera in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by the image display on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (H) and 8-31 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (B) and 8-27 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the setting suggestion effect by the player is performed. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 and 8-22, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, or a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 and 8-31, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished) corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a pre-reading notice effect with a white square or a star shape, or the hold memory display may be set as a pre-read notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or a star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from that when it is displayed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold memory display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period, and to play the game. It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variable. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during the execution of the reach effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a notice effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-33 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the first hold storage display area 153SG005D is displayed in the image display device 5. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera). (Display so that the hold storage display of the embodiment is not hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 8-34 (A) and 8-34 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although the form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display for executing the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited thereto. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also has a plurality of set values (for example, a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player, which can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) which is advantageous for the player by performing variable display. For example, in a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of the set values 1 to 6), the variable display period is set as shown in the first period (for example, FIG. 8-14). , The special figure fluctuation period of super reach (43 seconds or 53 seconds) and the second period (for example, the special figure fluctuation period of non-reach or normal reach) which is shorter than the first period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14). A variable display period determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 5) that can be determined from a plurality of periods including 3.75 seconds to 20 seconds), and during the variable display. A setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during rear variable display) that gives suggestions regarding setting of a set value. A portion that executes the effect processing) and an effect execution means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) that can execute the suggestion effect over a specific period, and the setting suggestion effect is the first period. During the execution of the variable display, it is executed at a higher rate than during the execution of the variable display in the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the super reach. On the other hand, in the variable display of normal reach and non-reach, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed), the effect execution means makes a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then As the effects that can be executed after the specific timing, the first suggestion effect for continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state and the suggestion for setting the set value while continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state are provided. Among the second suggestion effects to be performed, a gaming machine capable of executing any of the suggestion effects (see, for example, FIG. 10-12) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the variable display of the second period in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the first period, so that the player cannot overlook the setting suggestion effect. Can be prevented. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Alternatively, as the gaming machine of the present invention, there are a plurality of other settings that can be variably displayed, can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and have different advantages to the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of the values (for example, 1 to 6), and the variable display period is shown in the first period (for example, FIG. 8-14). As shown in FIG. 8-14, a special figure of non-reach or normal reach is shown in the special figure fluctuation period of super reach (43 seconds or 53 seconds) and the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14) which is shorter than the first period. Variable display period determining means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 5) that can be determined from a plurality of periods including the variation period (3.75 seconds to 20 seconds) and variable display In the setting suggestion effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable shown in FIG. 7), which can execute the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display) for suggesting the setting of the set value. The setting suggestion effect is provided with an effect execution means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period (a portion that executes the effect processing during display). During the execution of the variable display of the period, it is executed at a higher rate than during the execution of the variable display of the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the setting suggestion effect is executed in the variable display of the super reach. On the other hand, in the variable display of normal reach and non-reach, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed), and the effect execution means suggests the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. After that, either the first suggestion effect of ending the suggestion or the second suggestion effect of continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing and suggesting the setting of the set value. Examples include gaming machines capable of performing suggestive effects (see, for example, FIGS. 10-13).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the variable display of the second period in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the first period, so that the player cannot overlook the setting suggestion effect. Can be prevented. Further, by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after the specific timing, the game entertainment can be improved.

In this way, the suggestion of the set value is given by a plurality of elements (for example, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting of the set value during variable display, and a second suggestion effect that suggests the setting after a specific timing in a specific period. If multiple factors suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player, the player can be more confident that the setting value is advantageous to the player. Even if one factor does not suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player, if another factor suggests a setting value that is advantageous to the player, the player will be a setting value that is advantageous to the player. Since the expectation of the game can be maintained, the hobby of the game can be improved.
It should be noted that the setting value may be suggested by three or more elements. By doing so, if three or more factors suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, the player can be further convinced that the setting value is favorable to the player, and also. Even if one factor does not suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, if the remaining factors suggest a setting value that is favorable to the player, the player will be a setting value that is favorable to the player. Since the expectation of the player can be maintained and the remaining elements are of multiple types, the number of elements that suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player changes in the remaining elements (for example, the setting value is suggested by three elements). In the case of performing, there are cases where there are 0, 1 and 2 elements that suggest a setting value that is advantageous to the player in the remaining elements), which broadens the prediction of the set value and makes the game fun. Can be further improved.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect and improve the game entertainment, the player can control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state). A setting means (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. An effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a suggestion effect over a specific period is provided with a game control microcomputer 100 CPU 103 or the like that executes a set value change process in step S6A. In addition, the effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until the specific timing in the specific period, and then continues the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect of continuously performing the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state and suggesting the setting of the setting means (for example,). (See FIG. 10-12) Examples include gaming machines.

Alternatively, a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 1) that are a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player and have different advantages for the player. A setting means that can be set to any of the set values (such as 6) (for example, CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the set value change process in step S6A) and a suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period. The effect executing means (for example, an image display device 5, an effect control CPU 120, etc.) is provided, and the effect executing means ends the suggestion after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means is performed after the specific timing. (See, for example, FIG. 10-13). Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

Hereinafter, the feature portions of other morphological examples will be described.
(Explanation of the feature part regarding the set value)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body part and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch that can perform an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability variation lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the jackpot type during the jackpot game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game hall side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one in which the first special figure and the second special figure use individual display result judgment tables, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is determined regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is " The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. , The range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from ~ 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the values in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, among the hit determination values, as in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in a continuous numerical range consisting of a common numerical range or a common numerical range and a non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference The value is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round indicator are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold indicator 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in the state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag are cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It is also possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later) of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without the operation, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1020. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is more disturbed than the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to execute the determination of whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) a plurality of times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, the jackpot determination is performed using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, the value of the random number value MR1 is used when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 66AK)
In the feature unit 66AK, the specific effect can be executed at a predetermined ratio during the execution of the variable display. The specific production is a production in which various notices and suggestions are given. The specific effect of the feature unit 66AK includes an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting that it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a feasible effect. There is.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the effect control process process as the variable display start setting process for the feature unit 66AK. In the variable display start setting process, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step 66AKS011). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of the decorative symbol, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of the decorative symbol, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, the advance notice effect determination process is executed (step 66AKS012). The advance notice effect determination process makes it possible to determine the advance notice effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the advance notice effect determination process is executed, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step 66AKS013). The effect control pattern may include an effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates, a notice effect control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various effect executions. For example, in response to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern specification command, one of a plurality of prepared special figure fluctuation effect control patterns is selected and set as the usage pattern. Further, one of a plurality of prepared advance notice effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern in accordance with the determination result by the advance notice effect determination process in step 66AKS012. It should be noted that the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates and the advance notice effect control pattern are not limited to those in which separate effect control patterns are set, but one effect control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings of each effect is set. There may be. When the effect control pattern is determined, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. (Step 66AKS014). In addition, a setting is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step 66AKS015). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 66AKS013 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the hold display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step 66AKS016). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part (display part at the left end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested), and other hold numbers "2" to The hold display in the display area corresponding to "8" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. As a result, the hold display is shifted. In the active display unit provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the active display corresponding to the erased (digested) hold display may be performed in the hold display area. If the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start prize or the second start prize when the number of reserved memories is "0", the hold display is not updated and the active display area is displayed. Settings may be made to update the active display in. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step 66AKS017), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS011 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step 66AKS021). Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed can be determined based on, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

If the reach effect of the super reach is not executed (step 66AKS021; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step 66AKS022), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. At the time of non-reach, the variable display result becomes "missing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined to be a different (mismatched) decorative symbol in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the left fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to for confirmation. Of the symbols, the right-determined decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like is extracted, and the confirmation decoration is performed by referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. Among the symbols, the middle-fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined.

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the fixed decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is used in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left-right confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like, and refers to a left-right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. Of the fixed decorative symbols, the decorative symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Further, by extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the like and referring to the medium-determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the final decorative symbol is determined. Of these, the middle-fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 may be determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach-loss combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

At the time of normal reach when the variable display result becomes "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of big hit. The final stop symbol at the time of a big hit is determined to be the same (matching) decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a big hit confirmation symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 It suffices to determine the decorative symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step 66AKS021; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step 66AKS023). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and cases where the variable display result is "missing". At the time of super reach when the variable display result becomes "miss", the final stop symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a big hit where the variable display result is a "big hit", the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the big hit. At the time of super reach, the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "missing". It is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that make up such a reach loss combination and a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbol that can be determined as the reach symbol may include a plurality of types of decorative symbols, for example, seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative pattern corresponding to the numbers may be only an effect image showing the numbers, or may be an effect image showing various characters in addition to the numbers.

The reach symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the reach symbol. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. Following step 66AKS023, it is determined whether or not the determined reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024). At this time, if it is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step 66AKS024; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated.

When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step 66AKS024; Yes), the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed (step 66AKS025). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed is determined by referring to the setting suggestion effect execution decision table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. You can do it. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion effect execution may be updatable by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect or "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS025, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "with effect" to execute the setting suggestion effect (step 66AKS026). When it is determined that "no effect" is not executed (step 66AKS026; No), the stop symbol determination process is terminated. When it is determined that "with effect" (step 66AKS026; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS027). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step 66AKS027, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS027, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step 66AKS028), and then the stop symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern can be selected from a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example regarding the reach symbol determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-3 is prepared in advance as the reach symbol determination table. In step 66AKS023 of the stop symbol determination process, the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT01 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT01, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols to be the reach symbols differs depending on whether the variable display result is "missing" or "big hit". For example, when the variable display result is "missing", 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 and 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 2. 60 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 3, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 4, and 40 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 5. Is assigned, 30 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 6, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. When the variable display result is "big hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 and 30 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 2. 3 40 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number of 4, 50 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 4, and 60 judgment values are assigned to the decorative design corresponding to the number 5. 70 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 6 and 80 judgment values are assigned to the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7.

According to the setting in the table 66AKT01 shown in FIG. 10-3, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, and the number 2, the number 3, the number 4 As the number of, 5 and 6, the determination ratio of the decorative symbol becomes lower, and the determination ratio of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. When the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, and the numbers are 2, 3, 4, 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes higher, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. Therefore, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is the highest, and the numbers 6 and 5 As the number 4 becomes the number 3 and the number 2 becomes, the variable display result becomes "big hit" when stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state becomes low, and the number becomes 1. When the corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is the lowest.

FIG. 10-4 shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion effect execution determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4 is prepared in advance as a setting suggestion effect determination table. In step 66AKS025 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT02 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT02, the number of determination values assigned to the presence / absence of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on whether the variable display result is “miss” or “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "missing", 80 judgment values are assigned to "without effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 20 judgment values are assigned to "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. Is assigned. When the variable display result is "big hit", 40 judgment values are assigned to "without effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect, and 60 judgment values are assigned to "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. Assigned.

According to the settings in the table 66AKT02 shown in FIG. 10-4, when the variable display result is "missing", the determination ratio of "no effect" that does not execute the setting suggestion effect is "with effect" that executes the setting suggestion effect. It will be higher than the decision rate of. When the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio of "with effect" for executing the setting suggestion effect is higher than the determination rate for "without effect" for not executing the setting suggestion effect. Further, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The rate at which the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is low when the variable display result is "missing" and high when the variable display result is "big hit". As a result, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" and the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

FIG. 10-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. The suggestion contents of these setting suggestion patterns differ depending on whether or not the symbol display color is changed and the display color when the symbol display color is changed. The symbol display color is a display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is a normal display color. The pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color, suggesting that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, and suggests confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-5 (B) shows a setting example relating to the setting suggestion pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT03 shown in FIG. 10-5 (B) is prepared in advance as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step 66AKS027 of the stop symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT03 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT03, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2, and the judgments are assigned to the pattern RE-1 and the pattern RE-3. No value is assigned (0). When the set value is 2, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. , Pattern RE-3 has no determination value assigned (0). When the set value is 3, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 5, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. The pattern RE-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 6, 35 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern RE-2. Therefore, five determination values are assigned to the pattern RE-3.

In the feature unit 66AK, when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, so that the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-0, the expectation level which is an advantageous setting value for the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-1, the set value is 2 or more. It is confirmed that there is. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach symbol includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of the jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and 7 It includes a symbol display mode that suggests control of a jackpot gaming state such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number and suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed. The suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state will be continuously provided, and the suggestions regarding the set value will be provided.

In the feature unit 66AK, it is possible to execute so that the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined in the pattern RE-1 in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination process, so that the symbol display color is changed to copper. It will not be changed. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is different whether or not is changed to copper color. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion effect is not determined in the pattern RE-3 in step 66AKS028 of the stop symbol determination process, so that the symbol display color is changed to gold. There is nothing to do. In this way, the symbol display color is gold as a symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6. Whether or not it is changed to is different.

In the stop symbol determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS024 that the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the set value may be specified in step 66AKS027, and then the process may proceed to step 66AKS025. In step 66AKS025, the presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined not only by the variable display result but also by a different ratio depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, it may be decided that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate as long as the setting value is advantageous to the player. When the reach symbol is determined to be the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the variable display result may be "big hit" and it may be confirmed that the game is controlled to the big hit game state. Even if the reach symbol is not a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, it may be decided that the setting suggestion effect is executed at a high rate. As described above, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at different ratios according to the plurality of types of reach modes.

The setting suggestion effect was stopped and displayed as a reach symbol in place of the one that changes the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, or in addition to the one that changes the symbol display color. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, display of a background image, an outer frame image or any other effect image, output of sound by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of a decorative light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, operation of a movable member for effect, these. The production mode by any production device, such as a combination of a part or all, may be changed.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. For example, pattern RE-0 and pattern RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern RE-2 and pattern RE-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern RE-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern RE-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 66AKS012 of the variable display start setting process as the notice effect determination process. In the advance notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the effect according to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect type when the advance notice effect is executed are determined (step 66AKS041). In the advance notice effect, the presence or absence of the effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the advance notice effect type determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect type. You can do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect type may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In step 66AKS041, it is determined to be either "no notice" in which the notice effect is not executed, or "step up", "character", or "title" in the case of executing the notice effect.

Among the notice effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a step-up notice corresponding to the "step-up" effect type, a character notice corresponding to the "character" effect type, and a "title" effect type. It suffices if the corresponding title notice is included. In the step-up notice, the effect mode in the advance notice effect, such as the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, is changed stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages. The effect mode to be changed in the step-up notice is not limited to the display of the effect image on the image display device 5, but the sound output by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable effect for the effect. The operation of the members, or a combination of some or all of them may be included. In the step-up notice, after the effect according to the first effect mode is executed, it may end without changing the effect mode. In this embodiment, when the step-up notice is executed, in the display area of the effect image surrounded by the square-shaped outer frame of the predetermined display color while the variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed. By the effect display in which the display contents (display mode) of the effect image showing the character are displayed in a switchable manner according to a predetermined order, the effect mode is changed to a plurality of stages and the effect is stepped up. The effect image displayed when the step-up notice is executed includes an outer frame partial image showing a display frame and an inner frame partial image used for switching display in a step change. The partial image in the frame may be a still image that is still displayed at each stage of the step change, or a moving image that is displayed as an animation at each stage of the step change.

In the character notice, an effect image showing a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5. The character notice is a rate controlled to the jackpot game state according to the type, size, color, pattern, movement, dialogue, or a combination of some or all of these characters (big hit expectation). Is executed differently. In the title notice, a title with a predetermined character image is displayed on the image display device 5. The title notice is controlled to the jackpot game state according to the content, size, color, pattern, display timing, display period, display update speed, or the production mode including some or all combinations of these. It is executed so that the ratio (big hit expectation) is different.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS041, it is determined whether or not it is determined that "no advance notice" is not executed (step 66AKS042). If "no notice" is determined (step 66AKS042; Yes), the notice effect determination process is terminated. If it is not "no notice" (step 66AKS042; No), it is determined whether or not "step-up" corresponding to the step-up notice is determined (step 66AKS043). When the "character" or "title" other than the "step-up" is determined (step 66AKS043; No), the effect pattern according to the "character" or "title" is determined (step 66AKS044). The effect patterns of the character advance notice and the title advance notice are a plurality of advance notices by referring to the advance notice effect pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the advance notice effect pattern. It may be decided to be one of the production patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the advance notice effect pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

When the effect type of the advance notice effect is determined to be "step up" (step 66AKS043; Yes), the number of steps pattern is determined (step 66AKS045). The step number pattern is an effect pattern corresponding to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice. The step number pattern can be selected from a plurality of step number patterns by referring to a step number pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the step number pattern. It should be decided. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the number of steps pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. In this embodiment, five patterns SU-1 to SU-5 are provided as a plurality of step number patterns, and the number of steps is any one of 1 to 5 according to each pattern.

Based on the determination result of step 66AKS045, it is determined whether or not the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046). When the number of steps pattern other than the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; No), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated. When the pattern SU-5 is determined (step 66AKS046; Yes), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step 66AKS047). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 may receive a set value notification command transmitted from the main board 11 side and store the notified set value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step 66AKS047, the set value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step 66AKS047, the outer frame display pattern is determined (step 66AKS048), and then the advance notice effect determination process ends. The outer frame display pattern corresponds to whether or not to change the display color of the outer frame partial image when the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice reaches 5, and the outer frame display color when changing. It is a production pattern. The outer frame display pattern displays a plurality of outer frames by referring to the outer frame display pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the outer frame display pattern. It may be determined by one of the patterns. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the outer frame display pattern may be updated by using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-7 shows a setting example regarding the advance notice effect type determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT04 shown in FIG. 10-7 is prepared in advance as the advance notice effect type determination table. In step 66AKS041 of the advance notice effect determination process, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the effect type are determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT04 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT04, the variable display contents are assigned to the production type and the like according to whether the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", or "big hit". The number of judgment values is different.

The variable display content can be specified based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the display result of the variable display indicated by the variable display result notification command. When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change to the reach mode, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display display result. Becomes a "loss". When the variable display content is "normal (loss)", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of the normal reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "super (loss)", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of the super reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed. Then, the display result of the variable display becomes "missing". When the variable display content is "big hit", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, and then the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit".

In the determination table 66AKT04, for example, when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect type of "character" or "title" is not assigned a determination value (0). On the other hand, when the variable display content is "normal (loss)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the production type of "character", and when the variable display content is "super (loss)", the variable display content is "super (loss)". 50 judgment values are assigned to both the "character" and "title" production types, and when the variable display content is "big hit", 70 judgment values and "title" are assigned to the "character" production type. 100 judgment values are assigned to the effect type of, and there is a judgment value assignment. 30 judgment values are assigned to the notice type of "step-up" when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", and when the variable display content is other than "non-reach (loss)". 120 determination values are assigned. In the production type of "Title", when the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)" or "normal (loss)", no judgment value is assigned (0), and the variable display content is "super (loss)". ) ”, 50 determination values are assigned, and when the variable display content is“ big hit ”, 100 determination values are assigned. As a result, the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to the ratio controlled to the jackpot gaming state differs depending on whether the effect type is “step-up” or “title”. More specifically, even if the variable display content is other than "big hit", more judgment values are assigned to the "step-up" effect type than the "title" effect type, so the variable display content is Even in cases other than "big hit", it is easy to determine at a relatively high rate. On the other hand, as for the effect type of "Title", if the variable display content is other than "Big hit", only 50 judgment values are assigned when it is "Super (missing)", and "Step". Since a smaller judgment value is assigned than the effect type of "up", when the variable display result is other than "big hit", it is determined at a relatively low ratio. Therefore, when the title notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. According to the same comparison regarding the presence / absence of the effect of the advance notice effect and the number of judgment values assigned to the effect type, the jackpot expectation is higher when the title advance notice is executed than when the character advance notice is executed. .. When the character notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the step-up notice is executed. When the step-up notice is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the notice effect is not executed.

FIG. 10-8 (A) shows a configuration example of the step number pattern. In the plurality of step number patterns, the number of steps for changing the effect mode in the step-up notice is different from each other. More specifically, the pattern SU-1 has a number of steps of 1, the pattern SU-2 has a number of steps of 2, the pattern SU-3 has a number of steps of 3, and the pattern SU-4 has a number of steps of 4. The number of steps of SU-5 is 5. In the step-up notice, the production by the first production mode becomes the production of the first step, and each time the production mode is changed thereafter, the number of steps is increased by one step from the production of the second step to the production of the fifth step. proceed.

FIG. 10-8 (B) shows a setting example relating to the step number pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT05 shown in FIG. 10-8 (B) is prepared in advance as the step number pattern determination table. In step 66AKS045 of the advance notice effect determination process, the number of steps pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT05 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT05, the determination result of the number of steps pattern is determined according to whether the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", "normal (loss)", "super (loss)", or "big hit". The number of assigned judgment values is different. By comparing the number of determination values assigned to each step number pattern for each variable display content, in the step-up notice, the jackpot expectation increases as the number of steps increases from 1 to 3. In the pattern SU-4 and the pattern SU-5, when the variable display content is other than "big hit", the determination value is not assigned (0 pieces). Therefore, in the step-up notice, when the number of steps reaches 4 or 5, it is determined that the jackpot game state is controlled. As described above, in the step-up notice, as the number of steps in which the effect mode is changed in stages increases, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state increases.

FIG. 10-9 (A) shows a configuration example of the outer frame display pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns SC-0 to SC-3 are provided as a plurality of outer frame display patterns. The suggestion contents of these outer frame display patterns differ depending on the outer frame display color when the number of steps in the step-up notice reaches 5 in the fifth step. The outer frame display color is the display color of the outer frame partial image displayed in the step-up notice, and can be changed to a suggestion display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to white, which is the normal display color. .. The pattern SC-0 does not change the outer frame display color, and suggests that the degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. The pattern SC-1 changes the outer frame display color to copper color, and suggests confirmation that the set value is 2 or more. The pattern SC-2 changes the outer frame display color to silver, suggesting that there is a high degree of expectation, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. The pattern SC-3 changes the outer frame display color to gold, suggesting confirmation that it is 6, which is the highest set value. As described above, in the fifth step of the step-up notice, it is possible to suggest the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to whether or not the outer frame display color has changed and the outer frame display color after the change. ..

FIG. 10-9 (B) shows a setting example relating to the outer frame display pattern determination table of the feature unit 66AK. In the feature unit 66AK, the determination table 66AKT06 shown in FIG. 10-9 (B) is prepared in advance as the outer frame display pattern determination table. In step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, the outer frame display pattern is determined by referring to the determination table 66AKT06 or the like. In the determination table 66AKT06, there is a portion in which the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the outer frame display pattern differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value is 1, 95 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2, and the patterns SC-1 and the pattern SC-3 are judged. No value is assigned (0). When the set value is 2, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. , Pattern SC-3 has no determination value assigned (0). When the set value is 3, 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 4, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 5, 40 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. The pattern SC-3 is not assigned a judgment value (0). When the set value is 6, 35 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-0, 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-1, and 30 judgment values are assigned to the pattern SC-2. Therefore, five determination values are assigned to the pattern SC-3.

In the feature unit 66AK, when the display color of the outer frame partial image in the step-up notice is changed, the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step in which the number of steps in the step-up notice is 5, so that the jackpot game state is controlled. It is confirmed that it will be done. If the outer frame display color does not change with the pattern SC-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and if the outer frame display color is changed to copper color with the pattern SC-1, the set value is set. Is determined to be 2 or more. Further, when the outer frame display color is changed to silver by the pattern SC-2, the expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the outer frame display color is changed to gold by the pattern SC-3. It is confirmed that it is 6, which is the highest set value. In this way, in the plurality of steps when the effect mode is changed stepwise in the step-up notice, there are a notification step for notifying that the game is controlled to a big hit game state such as a fourth step when the number of steps is four. It includes a suggestion step that suggests a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a fifth step when the number of steps is five. Then, after changing to the effect mode of the fourth step, the effect mode is changed to the effect mode of the fifth step. Therefore, after the effect mode is changed to the notification stage, the effect mode is changed to the suggestion stage.

In the feature unit 66AK, it is possible to execute so that the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to the pattern SC-1 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so that the outer frame display color is copper. It does not change to color. In this way, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to copper as the effect mode of the fifth step. different. If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the outer frame display pattern is not determined to the pattern SC-3 in step 66AKS048 of the advance notice effect determination process, so that the outer frame display color is gold. It will not be changed. As described above, depending on whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, whether or not the outer frame display color is changed to gold is different as the effect mode of the fifth step.

In the notice effect determination process, when it is determined in step 66AKS043 that "step-up notice", the set value may be specified by step 66AKS047, and then the process may proceed to step 66AKS045. In step 66AKS045, the number of steps pattern may be determined not only by the variable display content but also by a different ratio depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the step number pattern may be determined so that the number of steps increases at a high rate as long as the set value is advantageous to the player. Even when the pattern SU-4 or the pattern SU-5 is determined, the variable display result may become "missing" at a predetermined ratio and may not be controlled in the big hit game state. Even when the number of steps pattern other than the pattern SU-5 is determined, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. In this case, if the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-5, the outer frame display pattern may be determined at a high rate other than the pattern SC-0. In this way, when the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, even if it is possible to change to the effect mode that suggests the set value by a different ratio according to the number of steps as the number of steps for changing the effect mode. Good.

The effect mode that suggests the set value in the fifth step of the step-up notice is to change the outer frame display color, which is the display color of the outer frame partial image, or to change the outer frame display color. In addition, the shape and pattern of the outer frame partial image, the shape and pattern and color of the inner frame partial image, audio output by the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of light emitting members such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LED, for directing Any effect mode in the step-up notice, such as the operation of the movable member and a combination of a part or all of them, may be changed.

The plurality of outer frame display patterns may include a pattern that can be determined only when the jackpot game state is controlled, and a pattern that can be determined even when the jackpot game state is not controlled. For example, pattern SC-0 and pattern SC-1 can be determined at a predetermined ratio even when the variable display result is "missing", whereas pattern SC-2 and pattern SC-3 are variable display. It may be possible to determine at a predetermined ratio only when the result is "big hit", and it may not be possible to determine when the variable display result is "missing". In this case, the pattern SC-2 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas the pattern SC-3 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process as the effect process during variable display with respect to the feature unit 66AK. In the variable display during effect processing, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (step 66AKS061). At this time, the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and the variable display time is changed when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. It may be determined that the lapse has passed. When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 66AKS061; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The effect control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the effect control pattern determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, off, and blinked. It suffices that various effects can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating the effect movable member or by combining a part or all of them.

In the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10-10, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062). The advance notice effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern, etc.) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the advance notice effect period is reached (step 66AKS062; Yes), control for executing the advance notice effect is performed (step 66AKS063). When the step-up notice is executed by the control of step 66AKS063, the notice effect that changes the effect mode stepwise can be executed as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Further, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, it is possible to suggest the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by changing the outer frame display color to the effect mode of the fifth step in which the outer frame display color can be changed. ..

When it is not the advance notice effect period (step 66AKS062; No), or after the control of step 66AKS063 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach effect period (step 66AKS064). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (such as the effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step 66AKS064; Yes), the control to execute the reach effect is performed (step 66AKS065). By controlling step 66AKS065, for example, by executing the reach effect of normal reach or super reach, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. Further, when the decorative symbol to be the reach symbol is stopped and displayed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state can be changed according to the reach symbol as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state. At this time, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach effect after changing the symbol display color is executed to continuously suggest the control of the jackpot game state and pachinko. It is possible to make a new suggestion regarding the set value of the game machine 1.

When it is not the reach effect period (step 66AKS064; No), or after the control of step 66AKS065 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change effect period (step 66AKS066). The change effect period may be predetermined as an execution period of the effect of changing the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. When it is determined that the change effect period is reached (step 66AKS066; Yes), control for executing the change effect is performed (step 66AKS067).

When it is not the change effect period (step 66AKS066; No), or after the control of step 66AKS067 is performed, for example, the decorative pattern is variable based on the setting in the effect control pattern determined in response to the fluctuation pattern. After performing control for executing the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step 66AKS068), the effect process during the variable display is terminated.

When it is determined in step 66AKS061 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 66AKS061; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step 66AKS069). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 66AKS069; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the device waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step 66AKS069; Yes), the display result is obtained in the variable display of the decorative symbol, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) (step 66AKS070). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step 66AKS071). Further, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step 66AKS072), the effect process during variable display is terminated.

FIG. 10-11 shows the execution period and the execution timing of various effects during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol with respect to the feature unit 66AK. Of these, FIG. 10-11 (A) shows the execution period and the execution timing of the variable display-related effect including the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol. FIG. 10-11 (B1) shows the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed. FIG. 10-11 (B2) shows the symbol display color when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. FIG. 10-11 (C) shows the execution period and execution timing of the advance notice effect which is a step-up notice. FIG. 10-11 (D) shows the execution period, the effect time, and the content of the effect according to the execution step for the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T0, and then the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach establishment at the timing T1. The symbol display color is maintained at the normal display color until the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed at the timing T3 via the reach development that shifts from the reach effect of the normal reach to the reach effect of the super reach at T2. In this case, when the reach is established at the timing T1, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is controlled to the jackpot game state according to which of the numbers 1 to 7 corresponds to the decorative symbol. The rate of being done is different. In this way, by setting the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol to the decorative symbol corresponding to any of the numbers 1 to 7, it is possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state.

When the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, for example, after the reach development from the normal reach reach effect to the super reach reach effect at timing T2, the change effect is executed and the symbol display color is the normal display color. Can be changed to the suggested display color. However, in the case of the setting suggestion pattern RE-0, the symbol display color does not change even when the change effect is executed. When the change effect is executed and the symbol display color can be changed, the ratio of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol is controlled to the jackpot game state by the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. Is suggested to be high. In addition, when the change effect is executed, a setting value advantageous to the player is set according to whether or not the symbol display color of the reach symbol is changed and the suggested display color when the change is executed. The proportions are different. In this way, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as the reach symbol, the effect that can be executed in the period after the specific timing, such as the period after the timing T2 at which the reach effect of the super reach can be executed, is as an effect. By making it possible to change the symbol display color of the reach symbol by the change effect, it is possible to continuously give suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to suggest the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Since the reach symbol is stopped and displayed when the reach is established at the timing T1, it is possible to suggest the control of the jackpot game state by the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as the reach symbol in the specific period after the timing T1. .. Then, when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state until the timing T2 in the specific period. It is suggested that the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than that. After that, after the timing T2 in the specific period, when the change effect is executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 depends on whether or not the symbol display color of the reach symbol is changed and the suggested display color when the change is performed. Suggestions are made regarding the set value of. Further, even when the change effect is executed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 as the reach symbol is continuously stopped and displayed, so that the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state can be continuously performed. In this way, when the reach effect of normal reach or super reach is executed, the reach effect of normal reach can be executed in a specific period from the timing T1 when the reach is established to the timing T2 when the reach is developed, and as a reach symbol. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a different rate depending on the decorative symbol displayed as stopped. After that, until the timing T3 when the variable display ends after the timing T2, if the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion that the jackpot game state is controlled at a ratio corresponding to the reach symbol is continued. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the suggestion that the jackpot game state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the reach symbol is continuously given, and pachinko is performed according to the symbol display color of the reach symbol. Suggestions regarding the set values of the game machine 1 are made. It should be noted that the period from the timing T1 at which the reach is established to the timing T3 at the end of the variable display is set as a specific period in which the reach effect can be executed. Suggestion to be controlled by the gaming state is given, and from timing T2 to timing T3, a big hit is given at a rate according to the reach symbol. A big hit is given at a rate according to the reach symbol. There may be a case where the suggestion controlled by the gaming state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given according to the symbol display color of the reach symbol.

When the advance notice effect that is the step-up notice is executed, the step-up notice is started to be executed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing T0, the first step is taken in the period D11, and the step-up notice is executed in the period D12. It is the second step, the period D13 is the third step, the period D14 is the fourth step, and the period D15 is the fifth step. In this case, as a step-up notice, the display of the partial image in the frame changes stepwise from the first step to the fifth step. However, when the number of steps reaches the number of steps according to the determination result of the number of steps pattern, the execution of the step-up notice ends without changing the effect mode to be the next step.

In each of the first to third steps in the periods D11 to D13, the effect time is 1 second, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is executed at the timing T1 before the reach is established in the reach mode, and the jackpot is hit. It will be a big hit notice that gives suggestions regarding control of the game state. When the number of steps pattern is pattern SU-1, the first step in the period D11 is started, and when one second of the production time elapses and the first step in the period D11 is completed, the step-up notice is executed. Also ends. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-2, when the first step in the period D11 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-1, the display of the partial image in the frame is subsequently changed, and the period D12 When the second step in the above is started, one second of the production time elapses, and the second step in the period D12 is completed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-3, when the second step in the period D12 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-2, the display of the partial image in the frame is subsequently changed, and the period D13. When the third step in the above is started, one second of the production time elapses, and the third step in the period D13 is completed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed.

The fourth step in the period D14 is executed after the production time is 5 seconds, which is longer than 1 second, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is reached in the reach mode at the timing T1, and is controlled to the jackpot game state. It will be a big hit confirmation that will definitely notify that it will be done. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-4, the reach is established at the timing T1 after the third step in the period D13 is completed as in the case of the pattern SU-3, and then the partial image in the frame is displayed. When the fourth step in the period D14 is started by changing the display or the like, and the fourth step in the period D14 is completed after 5 seconds of the production time has elapsed, the execution of the step-up notice is also completed.

The fifth step in the period D15 is executed after the reach development in which the production time is 10 seconds, which is longer than 1 second or 5 seconds, and the transition from the normal reach reach production to the super reach reach production at timing T2. It is a jackpot confirmation that deterministically notifies that the jackpot game state is controlled, and in addition, it is a setting value suggestion that suggests a setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the number of steps pattern is the pattern SU-5, as in the case of the pattern SU-4, after the fourth step in the period D14 is completed, the reach is developed at the timing T2, and then the partial image in the frame is displayed. The fifth step in the period D15 is started by changing the display and the like. At this time, depending on whether the outer frame display pattern is pattern SC-0 to pattern SC-3, whether or not to change the outer frame display color as the display mode of the outer frame partial image, or when changing the display mode. Suggested display color is different. When 10 seconds of the effect time elapses from the start of the fifth step in the period D15 and the fifth step in the period D15 ends in this way, the execution of the step-up notice also ends.

Since the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the third step before the reach is established at the timing T1, in the specific period after the timing T0 at which the step-up notice can be executed, the period up to the timing T1 Depending on whether the execution of the step-up notice is completed or the step-up notice is continued until the next step, it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Then, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 4 or more, the fourth jackpot confirmation is notified as a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state in the period D14 included from the timing T1 to the timing T2 in the specific period. It can be changed to the effect mode of the step. Further, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, the outer frame corresponding to the outer frame display pattern is suggested as a suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the period D15 included after the timing T2 in the specific period. It can be changed to the effect mode of the fifth step, which is the display color.

If the number of steps pattern corresponds to any of patterns SU-1 to SU-4 and the number of steps is less than 5, step up before changing to the effect mode of the fifth step in the period D15. Execution of the notice ends. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, there is a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is given up to the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps less than 5, and then the suggestion is terminated. ing. On the other hand, when the number of steps pattern corresponds to the pattern SU-5 and the number of steps is 5, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed by changing to the effect mode of the fifth step in the period D15. Make suggestions about. Therefore, when the step-up notice is executed, the effect that can be executed after the timing T2 after the control related to the control of the jackpot gaming state is performed up to the timing T2 in the specific period corresponding to the number of steps of 5. This includes a case where the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is given.

When the advance notice effect of the step-up notice is executed, the effect mode is changed from the first step to the third step in a specific period from the timing T0 when the variable display is started to the timing T1 when the reach is established. It is possible to suggest that the jackpot game state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the effect mode is changed. After that, it can be suggested that the jackpot game state is controlled by changing to the effect mode of the fourth step until the timing T2, which is the reach development after the timing T1. Further, it is suggested that the jackpot game state will be controlled if the effect mode of the fifth step is changed until the timing T3 at which the variable display ends after the timing T2, and the outer frame of the outer frame partial image Suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made according to the display color. The period from the timing T0 at which the variable display is started to the timing T3 at which the variable display ends is set as a specific period in which the advance notice effect that is a step-up notice can be executed. It is suggested that the jackpot gaming state is controlled at a rate corresponding to the number of steps in which the mode is changed, and the suggestion ends without changing to the effect mode of the fifth step until the timing T3 after the timing T2. A case may be provided in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed by changing to the effect mode of the fifth step, and the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed according to the effect mode of the fifth step. ..

In the step-up notice, each step from the first step to the third step has an effect time of 1 second, the fourth step has an effect time of 5 seconds, and the fifth step has an effect time of 10 seconds. In the step-up notice, there are a plurality of stages in which the production mode is changed step by step, a notification stage for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled as in the fourth step, and a pachinko gaming machine 1 as in the fifth step. It includes a suggestion stage that gives suggestions regarding the set value of. Since the effect time of the fifth step is set to be longer than the effect time of the fourth step, the suggestion stage has a longer execution period than the notification stage. Generally, when an effect (advantageous effect) for notifying an advantage is executed, a player takes an image or a video of the effect with a mobile terminal owned by the player and shoots it on an SNS (Social). There is a tendency to post on member registration-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, there arises a problem that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for productions that are often performed even in disadvantageous cases (disadvantageous productions), since the motivation for shooting is not aroused, if the execution period of the disadvantageous productions is long, the player will rather feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, in the feature unit 66AK, the execution period for the advantageous effect is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period for the unfavorable effect is shorter than that for the advantageous effect to reduce discomfort. In the step-up notice of the feature unit 66AK, the production time of the fourth step, which is the big hit confirmation, is longer than the production time from the first step to the third step, which is the big hit notice. In addition, the effect time of the fifth step, which is a suggestion of the set value when the big hit is confirmed, is longer than the effect time of the fourth step. As a result, when the effect mode is changed to the fifth step of suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking it and to secure the shooting time. In addition, by securing the shooting time, the shot images and moving images can be published by the player on the Internet, and the public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, by disclosing the images taken by which pachinko machine 1 in which game field, the game field was advertised by the players from the game field side. become. As described above, by securing the shooting time when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the player but also to the game hall side.

The effect time of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be different depending on a plurality of setting suggestion patterns. For example, pattern RE-0 has an effect time of 3 seconds, pattern RE-1 has an effect time of 7 seconds, pattern RE-2 has an effect time of 12 seconds, and pattern RE-3 has an effect time of 15. The production time corresponding to each pattern may be set so as to be seconds. As described above, the execution period of the effect may be different depending on the effect mode when suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the case of the production mode having a high advantage for the player, the execution period may be longer than in the case of the production mode having a low advantage for the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the effect when the effect mode is changed to suggest that the set value is advantageous, and it is possible to secure the shooting time.

In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the symbol display color which is the display color of the reach symbol. In the fifth step of the step-up notice, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested by making it possible to change the outer frame display color which is the display color of the outer frame partial image. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step of the step-up notice, at least a part such as the target image whose display color can be changed, such as the symbol display color and the outer frame display color. It is possible to make suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to different production modes. On the other hand, both the symbol display color and the outer frame display color can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set according to a production mode in which at least a part is common. It would be good if we could make suggestions about the value. The symbol display color and the outer frame display color may be changed to suggestion display colors different from each other. Alternatively, the symbol display color may be changed in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, while the effect mode other than the display color may be changed in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to change the effect mode other than the symbol display color, while in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the outer frame display color may be changed. In the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the effect mode other than the symbol display color may be changed, and in the fifth step of the step-up notice, the effect mode other than the display color may be changed. In these cases, it suffices that the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step of the step-up notice can give suggestions regarding the setting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in all different production modes.

The setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol may be executed at a timing different from the fifth step of the step-up notice. For example, after executing the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the effect mode may be changed to correspond to the fifth step of the step-up notice. Alternatively, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol may be executed after changing to the effect mode corresponding to the fifth step of the step-up notice. As described above, after the specific timing in the specific period, suggestions regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made at a plurality of timings. In this case, the execution mode of the suggestion effect at another timing may be different depending on the execution mode of the suggestion effect at one timing. As an example, depending on whether or not the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, the ratio of whether or not the effect mode is changed up to the fifth step may be different in the step-up notice. When the suggestion effect is executed at the timing of 1, it may be restricted so that the suggestion effect at the other timing is not executed. For example, when the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, a determination value in the determination table may be set as the step number pattern of the step-up notice so that the pattern SU-5 is not determined. .. With such a setting, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, while the setting suggestion using the reach symbol is used. Within the range in which the effect is executed, there is a limit as a limit that the effect mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a high rate within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. Within this range, a limit may be provided as a limit for changing the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate. Alternatively, the relationship between the range and the limit may be interchanged. That is, in the step-up notice, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed while the effect mode can be changed up to the fifth step at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. As long as it is not done, there may be a limit as a limit that the effect mode is not changed until the fifth step. In addition, the step-up notice can change the effect mode up to the fifth step at a high rate within the range in which the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is executed. As long as it is not done, there may be a limit as a limit of changing the effect mode up to the fifth step at a low rate.

Regarding the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, the same restrictions as in the case of the step-up notice may be provided. For example, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the fifth step. As long as it is allowed, there may be a limit as a limit that it is not executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a high rate within the range in which the step-up notice does not change the effect mode until the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode until the fifth step. As long as it is allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that enables execution at a low rate. Alternatively, the relationship between the range and the limit may be interchanged. That is, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a predetermined ratio within the range in which the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step. As long as it is not allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that it is not executed. In addition, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed at a high rate within the range in which the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step, while the step-up notice changes the effect mode up to the fifth step. As long as it is not allowed, a limit may be set as a limit that enables execution at a low rate.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the fifth step in the step-up notice, multiple suggestion effects are executed at multiple timings for any suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When possible, the execution mode of the suggestion effect at another timing may be different depending on the execution mode of the suggestion effect at one timing. Further, regarding any suggestion effect capable of suggesting the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a plurality of suggestion effects can be executed at a plurality of timings, the suggestion effect at one timing is performed at another timing. There may be restrictions on the suggestion effect.

FIG. 10-12 shows an execution example of the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol. FIG. 10-12 (A) shows an effect execution example 66AK101 in the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode and the reach is established. At this time, the reach is established by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 7 in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right", and the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-12 (B) shows an effect execution example 66AK102 in the case where the reach effect of the normal reach is the reach development that shifts to the reach effect of the super reach. At this time, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect image in the reach effect of the super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-12 (C) shows an effect execution example 66AK103 when the change effect is executed. At this time, the effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed by superimposing it on the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed, and the effect image that notifies a message such as "design display color change !!" is displayed. Suggestions are made to change the symbol display color.

FIG. 10-12 (D1) shows an effect execution example 66AK111 in which the symbol display color does not change corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-12 (D2) shows an effect execution example 66AK112 in which the symbol display color is changed to copper color corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-12 (D3) shows an effect execution example 66AK113 in which the symbol display color is changed to silver corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-12 (D4) shows an effect execution example 66AK114 in which the symbol display color is changed to gold corresponding to the case where the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-3. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-0, the display color of the reach pattern does not change as in the effect execution example 66AK111, and the normal display color of red is not changed. As a result, a failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-1, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to copper as in the effect execution example 66AK112, which suggests that the set value is 2 or more. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-2, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to silver as in the production execution example 66AK113, so that it is highly expected that the setting value is advantageous for the player. Suggest. When the setting suggestion pattern is the pattern RE-3, the display color of the reach pattern is changed to gold as in the effect execution example 66AK114, which suggests the determination of 6, which is the highest set value.

FIG. 10-13 shows an execution example of a notice effect which is a step-up notice. FIG. 10-13 (A) shows an effect execution example 66AK201 in the first step of the step-up notice. FIG. 10-13 (B) shows an effect execution example 66AK202 in the second step of the step-up notice. FIG. 10-13 (C) shows an effect execution example 66AK203 in the third step of the step-up notice. FIG. 10-13 (D) shows an effect execution example 66AK204 in the fourth step of the step-up notice. 10-13 (E1) to (E4) show production execution examples 66AK 211-66AK214 in the fifth step of the step-up notice. In the effect execution examples 66AK2001 to 66AK204, the effect mode is changed stepwise by sequentially switching the characters displayed by the partial image in the frame corresponding to the first step to the fourth step. In the effect execution example 66AK 211-66AK214, the character displayed by the partial image in the frame is switched to all the characters displayed from the first step to the fourth step corresponding to the fifth step, so that the effect mode is changed. Change.

Further, in the effect execution example 66AK 211 to 66AK214, the display color of the outer frame partial image can be changed corresponding to the outer frame display pattern. In the effect execution example 66AK211 shown in FIG. 10-13 (E1), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-0, the outer frame display color does not change, and the normal display color remains red. As a result, a failure effect (gase effect) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low. In the effect execution example 66AK212 shown in FIG. 10-13 (E2), the set value is 2 or more because the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-1 and the outer frame display color is changed to copper. Suggests confirmation of that. In the effect execution example 66AK213 shown in FIG. 10-13 (E3), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-2, and the outer frame display color is changed to silver, so that the set value is advantageous for the player. It suggests that a certain degree of expectation is high. In the effect execution example 66AK214 shown in FIG. 10-13 (E4), the outer frame display pattern corresponds to the pattern SC-3, and the outer frame display color is changed to gold, which is the highest set value of 6. Suggest confirmation.

In general, it becomes difficult to further raise the expectation of the player after the notification controlled to the jackpot game state is performed. On the other hand, the feature unit 66AK makes a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and then after a specific timing of the specific period, the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol and the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice. By providing a case where a suggestion regarding the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set even after the notification controlled to the jackpot gaming state is performed. As expected, the production can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and is shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a part of the configuration.

As a specific example, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol can be executed, the suggestion regarding the set value according to the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may not be executed. Alternatively, while the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol is not executed, the suggestion regarding the set value according to the effect mode of the fifth step in the step-up notice may be feasible.

The chance-up effect may be executed together with the step-up advance notice effect, the character advance notice effect, the title advance notice effect, or in place of a part or all of them. In the chance-up effect, a character appears on the image display device 5 during the reach effect, and the content of the character's dialogue suggests a big hit expectation. In addition, the effect mode of the chance-up effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the jackpot expectation to the player, and may not be the effect that suggests the jackpot expectation depending on the character's dialogue content.

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display start setting process. When the variable display result is a big hit, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the chance-up effect is executed are based on the fact that the variable display result is a big hit and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And decide. If the variable display result is lost, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the chance-up effect is executed are based on the fact that the variable display result is lost and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And decide.

FIG. 10-14 shows a setting example of an effect pattern that can be determined when the chance-up effect is executed. In this setting example, four patterns CU-1 to CU-4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when the chance-up effect is executed. The pattern CU-1 is an effect pattern indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (big hit expectation: low), and the pattern CU-2 has a jackpot expectation higher than that of the pattern CU-1 (big hit expectation: high). It is a production pattern showing that. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are both effect patterns for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, but the effect modes are different.

FIG. 10-15 (A) shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the variable display result is executed when the variable display result is a big hit. In this determination example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 39%, and the chance-up effect is pattern CU- at a rate of 10%. Decided to execute at 1 and decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4 at a rate of 1%. If the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 38%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 2%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 37%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 3%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 36%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 4%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 5, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 35%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 5%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4. If the set value set for the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, it is decided that the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 34%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 10% with the pattern CU-1. Was decided, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-2 at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect was decided to be executed by pattern CU-3 at a rate of 10%, and the rate was 6%. It is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the pattern CU-4.

FIG. 10-15 (B) shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern when the variable display result is executed when the variable display result is lost. In this determination example, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the chance-up effect is executed at a rate of 40% with the pattern CU-1. Decided to do, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-2 at a rate of 10%, decided to execute the chance-up effect with pattern CU-3 at a rate of 0%, 0% It is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 at the ratio of.

By setting such a determination ratio, among the cases where the chance-up effect is executed, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-1, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state is low (the jackpot expectation is low). ), And when the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is high (the jackpot expectation is high). When the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, it is always controlled to the big hit game state. The ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 is the same regardless of the set value (uniformly 10%), whereas the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-4 is the set value. Is set to increase as the value increases. Therefore, the total of the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of the chance-up effect executed by the pattern CU-4 differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and in particular, the chance up The set value is suggested by the ratio at which the effect is executed in the pattern CU-4.

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), the determination ratio of the chance-up effect for notifying the control of the jackpot gaming state as in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 is when the set value is 1. Is 11%, when the set value is 2, 12%, when the set value is 3, 13%, when the set value is 4, 14%, when the set value is 5, 15%, and when the set value is 6. Is 16%, which differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the ratio of the chance-up effect executed in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, and the pachinko game machine It is set to increase as the set value set to 1 increases.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (chance-up effect control patterns) is selected and set as a usage pattern in response to the case where the execution of the chance-up effect is decided. You may. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the chance-up effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the chance-up effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table of the chance-up effect is set, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is updated every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device 5 or) is updated according to the updated timer value. The chance-up effect may be executed by controlling the speakers 8L, 8R, the effect lamp 9 and the like).

The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is the effect pattern for the jackpot notification when the chance-up effect is executed. When it is determined that the effect pattern is the jackpot notification, whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern when the set value suggestion effect is executed are determined based on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

FIG. 10-16 shows a setting example of an effect pattern that can be determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed. In this setting example, five effect patterns SS-1 to effect patterns SS-5 are prepared in advance as a plurality of effect patterns that can be determined when the set value suggestion effect is executed. The pattern SS-1 suggests that the set values may be odd (eg 1, 3, 5), and the pattern SS-2 suggests that the set values may be even (eg 2, 4, 6). Suggesting, pattern SS-3 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the odd-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 3 or 5), and pattern SS-4 suggests that the set value is greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 3 or 5). 4, or 6) is suggested, and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The pattern SS-1 and the pattern SS-2 are determined at a high ratio when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that the set value 5 or 6 (high setting) can be used. It is said that the degree of expectation of being present is low, and the pattern SS-3 and the pattern SS-4 are set values 5 and 6 by being determined at a high ratio when the set value is any of 5 and 6. It is said that there are high expectations for this. Here, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings. However, the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings, and the set values 1 may be set. 2 may be set to a low setting, setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

FIG. 10-17 shows a setting example of a ratio for determining whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed and the effect pattern when the set value suggestion effect is executed. In this setting example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 7.15%. Was decided to be executed in the pattern SS-1, and the set value suggestion effect was decided to be executed in the pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.35%, and the set value suggestion effect was patterned at a rate of 0.36%. Decided to execute on SS-3, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect on pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.14%, and set value suggestion effect on pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. Decide to do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 85%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 3.21%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 10.73%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 0.21%. Decided to perform the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 0.85%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 11.45%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 2.85%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 4.28%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 1.42%, and it was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 3.57%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 14.30%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 1.78%. Decided to do, decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 5.35%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 4.28%. It was decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 8.57%, and the set value suggestion effect was executed in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 10.73%. Decided to perform the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6.42%, and decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-5 at a rate of 0%. To do. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 65%, and the set value suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 at a rate of 10.00%. Decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-2 at a rate of 5.00%, and execute the set value suggestion effect in pattern SS-3 at a rate of 5.00%. It is decided to execute the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-4 at a rate of 12.50%, and the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 at a rate of 2.5%. To determine.

By setting the determination ratio in this way, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion effect is produced. Is executed in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4, which suggests that the set value is 5 or 6. Further, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined.

FIG. 10-18 shows the effect execution period in the variable display of the super reach when the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed. The chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect are effects that can be executed during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. The set value suggestion effect can be executed after the chance-up effect when it is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 that notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The set value suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying an effect image showing any or all of the plurality of characters on the image display device 5. is there. In addition, the effect mode of the set value suggestion effect may be any effect mode that can suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may not be an effect mode using a plurality of characters.

In step 66AKS013 of the variable display start setting process, one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (set value suggestion effect control pattern) is selected as the usage pattern in response to the case where the execution of the set value suggestion effect is decided. You may set it. Alternatively, by setting the timer value of the set value suggestion effect process timer, it may be possible to execute the set value suggestion effect according to the process table for each effect pattern. When the process table of the set value suggestion effect is set, the value of the set value suggestion effect process timer is updated every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the effect device (image display device) is updated according to the updated timer value. 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R, the effect effect lamp 9 and the like) may be controlled to execute the set value suggestion effect.

When a predetermined period has passed since the reach effect of Super Reach was started, a character is displayed at the lower part of the image display device 5 as a chance-up effect, and character information that is different depending on the effect pattern is displayed as a character line. Will be done. In particular, when the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the variable display result is a big hit depending on the dialogue displayed on the image display device 5, and after the variable display is completed, the big hit game state is set. It is notified that it will be controlled.

If the chance-up effect is executed in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the reach effect of Super Reach, a plurality of set value suggestion effects are performed after a specific period has passed since the chance-up effect was completed. Images of any or all of the characters are displayed. For example, when the set value suggestion effect is executed in patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-4, images of different characters are displayed in the image display device 5. When the set value suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5 (when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode for notifying that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6) In the image display device 5, all the characters that can be displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed when the set value suggestion effect is executed in the patterns SS-1 to SS-4. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to which character's image is displayed on the image display device 5 as the setting value suggestion effect, and the player is also made to pay attention to the number of images of the character displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The chance-up effect is a chance by making it possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the player by the ratio of executing the effect pattern to notify that the pachinko game state is controlled. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to the up-production. The set value suggestion effect can be executed after executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, which is an effect pattern for notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state during the reach effect of the super reach. Yes, the execution rate of the set value suggestion effect is set so that the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the execution rate. Therefore, the set value suggestion effect is executed after the chance-up effect. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and improve the interest of the game.

The specific suggestion effect may be a chance-up effect executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, or may be an advantageous state (big hit game) when the specific display result (variable display result is a big hit). In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) controlled by a state), if it is an effect of notifying that a specific display result is controlled to an advantageous state before being displayed (deriving display), the effect mode is particularly high. Does not matter. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled may be lower as the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is larger. The special suggestion effect may be the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 of the chance-up effect, and the predetermined effect may be a set value suggestion effect having a different effect mode from the chance-up effect, but the special suggestion effect and the predetermined effect are the same. It may be an effect of an effect mode, or a special suggestion effect and a predetermined effect may be executed as a series of effects. As the predetermined effect having a different effect mode from the special suggestion effect, for example, it may be applied to an effect that does not necessarily notify that the game is controlled to a big hit game state, such as a reach effect of super reach. By making it possible to execute only the chance-up effect among the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect, it may be possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by the chance-up effect.

The chance-up effect is provided as an effect pattern for notifying that the two effect patterns of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 are controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the chance-up effect is provided by the pattern CU-3. The ratio of execution is 10%, which is common regardless of the set value set in pachinko game machine 1, while the ratio of chance-up effect executed in pattern CU-4 is set in pachinko game machine 1. It depends on the set value. Since the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested by the ratio at which the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-4, the chance-up effect is the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-. It is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production by paying attention to the player depending on which of 4 is executed.

As the effect pattern of the chance-up effect, three or more effect patterns for notifying that the jackpot game state is controlled may be provided. Of the effect patterns that notify that the jackpot game state is controlled, only the execution ratio of some of the effect patterns may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or all the effects. The execution rate of the pattern may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After executing the chance-up effect with one effect pattern (for example, pattern CU-3) that notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state, the other effect that further notifies that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state. It may be feasible with a pattern (eg, pattern CU-4). In this case, the content to be notified to the player may differ depending on the number of times the chance-up effect is executed. For example, if the chance-up effect is executed only once in the pattern CU-3 during the variable display of 1, only the jackpot game state is notified, and the chance-up effect is the pattern CU- during the variable display of 1. When 3 and the pattern CU-4 are executed twice, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set within a predetermined range (for example, 4 to 4 to 4) in addition to the notification that the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It may be notified that it is in the range of 6). Whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1. Can draw the player's attention to. Further, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 depending on the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the effect pattern for notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state during the variable display of 1. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is, and it is possible to improve the game interest. The special suggestion effect may be the chance-up effect to be executed first, and the special effect may be the chance-up effect to be executed later. When the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not have to overlap, and the execution periods of both chance-up effects do not overlap. At least part of it may overlap. When the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, the execution period of the special suggestion effect and the execution period of the special effect do not overlap, and the execution period of the special suggestion effect and the execution period of the special effect. Includes both at least some of the duplicates. When the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, both chance-up effects may be executed over a plurality of variable displays. When the special suggestion effect and the special effect are executed within a specific period, both chance-up effects are executed during one variable display, and both chance-up effects are executed over a plurality of variable displays. Includes both of them. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display of 1, a plurality of setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects executed during the variable display of 1 are executed. When both chance-up effects are executed during the variable display, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested by the number of times the chance-up effects are executed during the plurality of variable displays. .. The pattern CU-3 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a predetermined range (for example, 1, 2, or 6). That) is used as an effect pattern to notify, and the pattern CU-4 is notified that it is controlled to the jackpot game state, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is within a range different from that of the pattern CU-3. It may be an effect pattern for notifying that (for example, it is in the range of 4 to 6). In this example, the pattern CU-3 is set to notify that the set value is 1, 2, or 6, and the pattern CU-4 is notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6. It is determined that the value is 6. In this way, the chance-up effect is executed by the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, so that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested more accurately. You may. If the chance-up effect is executed twice in pattern CU-3 or pattern CU-4 during the variable display of 1, whether or not the production periods of both chance-up effects overlap, and whether both chance-up effects are displayed. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested according to the length or the like in which the production periods overlap.

Instead of pattern CU-3 and pattern CU-4, chance-up effects can be executed multiple times with pattern CU-2, which is an effect pattern with high expectation for big hits, and these chance-up effects are executed with pattern CU-2. The suggested content may differ depending on the number of times it has been performed. Specifically, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, the period from the reach to the start of the reach effect of the super reach, and the variable display after the start of the reach effect of the super reach It is possible to execute the chance-up effect once for each period until the end (it is possible to execute the chance-up effect three times during one variable display), and if the chance-up effect is executed only once, a big hit is expected. It suggests that the degree is high, suggests that if the chance-up effect is executed twice, it will be controlled to the jackpot game state, and if the chance-up effect is executed three times, it is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be set to notify that the set value is in a predetermined range (for example, a range of 4 to 6). By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed in the pattern CU-2, so that the game interest can be improved.

Regarding the case where the suggestion content is different depending on the number of executions of the pattern CU-2, for example, the variable display result is specified at the start of the variable display, and if the variable display result is a miss or a small hit, a chance-up effect is produced. Is determined to be executed only once in the pattern CU-2. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is further specified. If the set value is any of 1 to 5, the execution in the chance-up effect pattern CU-2 is determined once or twice, and if the set value is 6, the chance-up effect pattern CU is determined. The execution at -2 may be decided to be one to three times. When the suggestion content is different depending on the number of times the pattern CU-2 is executed, the number of times the pattern CU-2 of the chance-up effect is executed is first determined by lottery, and the variable display result or the pachinko game machine 1 is set. The number of executions may be redetermined according to the set value.

The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the effect pattern notifying that the chance-up effect is controlled to the jackpot game state is, for example, the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the rate of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4. It is the total of the ratio of the chance-up effect to the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of the chance-up effect to be executed by the pattern CU-4, while being set to the pachinko game machine 1. The ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-3 and the ratio of executing the chance-up effect in the pattern CU-4 may be different depending on the set value. In this case, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the player according to the execution ratio of the pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4, which are the effect patterns for notifying the player that the jackpot game state is controlled. By suggesting this, you can improve the interest of the chance-up production. It may be possible to execute a setting value change suggestion effect indicating that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. In particular, when the setting value change suggestion effect is executed on the next day or the like when a low setting value is suggested by the chance-up effect or the like in the pachinko game machine 1, a high setting value is set for the pachinko game machine 1 for the player. Since it can be expected that the player is playing, the player's game can be promoted. The effect period of the set value suggestion effect may be set longer than the effect period of the chance-up effect. By doing so, as proof that the pachinko game machine 1 in which the high setting value is set has played the game, the period during which the player takes an image of the setting value suggestion effect with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone can be set. Can be secured. Further, in the case where the player secures the period for shooting the image of the set value suggestion effect by setting the effect period of the set value suggestion effect longer than the effect period of the chance up effect, the chance is further increased. After the effect is executed in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4, the effect suggesting that the set value suggestion effect is executed can be executed, so that the player who recognizes the effect suggests the set value. The mobile terminal may be ready by the start of the production. The pattern CU-3 and the pattern CU-4 may be determined as the effect pattern of the chance-up effect only when the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is determined in the variable special figure.

The special suggestion effect may be an effect (so-called full rotation reach effect) in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a combination of big hits. When a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbol can be executed, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbol up to the maximum number of times may be used as the special suggestion effect. For variable display that has not been executed yet. When the hold display notice effect that announces the variable display result in the display mode of the hold memory display can be executed, the display in gold or rainbow color of the hold memory display is a special suggestion effect. May be. In addition, special suggestions are given for light emission in a mode of notifying the jackpot of the game effect lamp 9, sound output for notifying the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R, the operation of a specific movable body, or a combination of some or all of them. It may be used as a production. These multiple specials when it is possible to perform full rotation reach, pseudo-continuous production, hold memory display production, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8 and 8R, movement of the movable body, etc., which are special suggestion effects. Different setting values may be suggested by combining the suggestion effects and changing the effect mode of the special suggestion effect to be executed later. For example, after it is notified that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the revariable display are executed up to the upper limit number of times (for example, 4 times) as a pseudo continuous effect and controlled to the jackpot game state, the full rotation reach effect is executed. , As this full rotation reach effect, if the variable display direction of the decorative symbol is from above to downward, it is notified that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and as this full rotation reach effect, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. If the direction is from left to right, it notifies that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and as this full rotation reach effect, the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is an image display device seen from the player. You may notify that the set value is 6 as long as it is directed from the back side to the front side of 5. Alternatively, after it is notified that the game effect lamp 9 emits rainbow colors at the start of the variable display to control the jackpot game state, if the melody A is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the set value is 1 to 1. If the melody B is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the speaker 8L and 8R are notified that the set value is any of 4 to 6, and the melody C is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, it may be notified that the set value is 6. Alternatively, after it is notified that the hold memory display is displayed in rainbow colors and the variable display result corresponding to the hold memory display becomes a big hit (it is controlled to the big hit game state after the variable display ends), this big hit The movable body A operates by the end of the variable display to notify that the set value is one of 1 to 3, and the movable body B operates by the end of the variable display that becomes a big hit. By notifying that the set value is any of 4 to 6, the set value is 6 by operating both the movable body A and the movable body B by the end of the variable display which is a big hit. May be notified.

When it is possible to suggest the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in both the chance-up effect and the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value suggested in the chance-up effect and the setting value suggested in the setting value suggestion effect are individually indicated. If it is determined to be, it is conceivable that the contents of both suggestions do not match depending on the mode of the chance-up effect and the set value suggestion effect. Therefore, for example, when the execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 is not decided and the set value is not suggested in the chance-up effect, the set value may be suggested only by the set value suggestion effect. Often, the set value may be suggested in the chance-up effect, such as determining the execution in the pattern CU-3 or the pattern CU-4 only when the non-execution of the set value suggestion effect is determined. Whether or not the clerk of the game hall suggests the set value as a chance-up effect by using the effect adjustment function provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and the ratio of execution / non-execution of the set value suggestion effect can be changed. May be good.

In addition to the chance-up effect, the jackpot expectation may be suggested by an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo-continuous effect or a look-ahead notice effect, and a suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made. The feature unit 66AK can be applied to any effect as long as it is possible to make a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display and then make a suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. it can. For example, in the case of executing an arbitrary effect, after giving a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed. At the same time, it may include a case of suggesting a set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, when performing an arbitrary effect, after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, the suggestion ends, and when the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continuously performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. It may include the case of making a suggestion about a value.

The suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may suggest, for example, whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. .. For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns having different determination ratios depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. Alternatively, the outer frame display pattern may include a pattern in which the determination ratio differs depending on whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the suggestion is made by the effect mode of the pattern determined at a high rate so that the player can recognize that the set value has been changed. Can be diversified to improve the game entertainment.

Part or all of the specific period, or part or all after the specific timing in the specific period may be included in the period after the end of the variable display. For example, while the variable display is being executed, the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be given, while the suggestion regarding the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be given. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine is accompanied by the execution of the big hit start effect (fanfare effect) and the big hit medium effect (effect corresponding to the first round and the second round, etc.). You may make a suggestion about the setting value of 1. In some cases, the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested without suggesting the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, or with some or all of the suggestions for controlling the jackpot gaming state, make suggestions for controlling a state that is different from the jackpot gaming state and is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. For example, it may be a suggestion about a probability change state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is given may be suggested according to whether or not it is controlled.

The various restrictions may be any range or limitation as long as they do not deviate from the achievement purpose, the problem to be solved, or other purposes of the present invention. The range of the limitation may be a condition that makes the presence / absence, the ratio, and other quantities different for the execution of processing, control, and operation, and the limit of the limitation is the presence / absence, ratio, and other quantity for the execution of processing, control, and operation. The content may be different (for example, when stopping, reducing, reducing, etc.).

(Explanation of problem-solving means and effects of feature unit 66AK)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and has a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, for example, 1 to 6. For example, a setting means such as the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value change process in step S6A and a suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period, for example, which can be set to any of the setting values. It is provided with an effect executing means such as an image display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120, and the effect executing means is, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12, until a specific timing in a specific period, for example, a decorative symbol serving as a reach symbol. After making suggestions regarding the control of the advantageous state, as an effect that can be executed after a specific timing, for example, when the reach symbol becomes a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continued. The first suggestion effect to be performed and, for example, when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed, and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means (setting of the set value) is performed. Of the second suggestion effect, any suggestion effect can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect after a specific timing.

Alternatively, as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous to the player, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled to an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state, and have different advantages for the player, for example, 1. It is possible to set a setting value of any of 3 to 6, for example, a setting means such as CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the setting value change process in step S6A, and a suggestion effect can be executed over a specific period. For example, an effect executing means such as an image display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120 is provided, and the effect executing means suggests control of an advantageous state up to a specific timing in a specific period, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-13. After that, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is less than 5, the first suggestion effect for ending the suggestion and, for example, when the number of steps of the step-up notice is 5, it can be executed after a specific timing. As the effect, one of the second suggestion effects, in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the setting means (setting of the set value) is performed, can be executed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by making it possible to execute either the first suggestion effect that suggests up to a specific timing and ends, or the second suggestion effect that suggests after a specific timing. Can be done.

The specific period may be included in at least the execution period of the variable display in which the reach effect can be executed, such as the period after the timing T2.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The reach mode of the variable display includes a plurality of types of reach modes having different ratios controlled in an advantageous state, such as a reach symbol with a decorative symbol corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7, and the effect execution means has a variable display reach. After becoming the aspect, the reach aspect may be changed to a specific aspect, for example, the symbol display color may be copper, silver, or gold.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

After a specific timing, the effect executing means executes an effect having a different mode depending on the setting of the setting means (setting of the set value), for example, the effect according to the patterns RE-0 to RE-3 which are the setting suggestion patterns. It may be possible.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The effect execution means changes the effect mode stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages, for example, a step-up notice effect, and as the number of stages in which the effect mode is changed increases, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state increases. The suggestion effect may be feasible.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

The plurality of stages include setting of setting means (setting value) such as an advantageous state notification stage for notifying that the control is controlled to an advantageous state such as the fourth step of the step-up notice effect and the fifth step of the step-up notice effect. The effect execution means may change the effect mode to the setting suggestion stage after a specific timing after changing the effect mode to the advantageous state notification stage. It is possible, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-11, the setting suggestion step may have a longer execution period than the advantageous state notification step.
In such a configuration, it is possible to raise the degree of attention to the production and improve the game entertainment.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portion 66AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 100 Game control microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (2)

It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display, can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player.
A variable display period determining means capable of determining a variable display period from a plurality of periods including a first period and a second period shorter than the first period.
A setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute a setting suggestion effect that gives suggestions regarding the setting of the set value during the variable display,
An effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect over a specific period,
With
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate during the execution of the variable display in the first period than during the execution of the variable display in the second period.
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until the specific timing in the specific period, and then continues to suggest the control of the advantageous state as an effect that can be executed after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect in which the suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state is continuously performed and the suggestion regarding the setting of the set value is performed.
A game machine characterized by that. It is a gaming machine that can perform variable display, can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can be set to any of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player.
A variable display period determining means capable of determining a variable display period from a plurality of periods including a first period and a second period shorter than the first period.
A setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute a setting suggestion effect that gives suggestions regarding the setting of the set value during the variable display,
An effect execution means that can execute a suggestion effect over a specific period,
With
The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate during the execution of the variable display in the first period than during the execution of the variable display in the second period.
The effect executing means gives a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state until a specific timing in the specific period, and then terminates the suggestion, and a suggestion regarding the control of the advantageous state after the specific timing. It is possible to execute one of the second suggestion effects, which is continuously performed and suggests the setting of the set value.
A game machine characterized by that.